annotate runtime/doc/usr_41.txt @ 2642:840c3cadb842

Updated runtime files.
author Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
date Tue, 16 Nov 2010 20:34:40 +0100
parents 073ff46fe397
children 916c90b37ea9
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
rev   line source
2642
840c3cadb842 Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2577
diff changeset
1 *usr_41.txt* For Vim version 7.3. Last change: 2010 Oct 31
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
3 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
4
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
5 Write a Vim script
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
6
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
8 The Vim script language is used for the startup vimrc file, syntax files, and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
9 many other things. This chapter explains the items that can be used in a Vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
10 script. There are a lot of them, thus this is a long chapter.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
11
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
12 |41.1| Introduction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
13 |41.2| Variables
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
14 |41.3| Expressions
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
15 |41.4| Conditionals
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
16 |41.5| Executing an expression
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
17 |41.6| Using functions
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
18 |41.7| Defining a function
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
19 |41.8| Lists and Dictionaries
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
20 |41.9| Exceptions
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
21 |41.10| Various remarks
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
22 |41.11| Writing a plugin
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
23 |41.12| Writing a filetype plugin
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
24 |41.13| Writing a compiler plugin
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
25 |41.14| Writing a plugin that loads quickly
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
26 |41.15| Writing library scripts
793
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
27 |41.16| Distributing Vim scripts
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
28
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
29 Next chapter: |usr_42.txt| Add new menus
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
30 Previous chapter: |usr_40.txt| Make new commands
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
31 Table of contents: |usr_toc.txt|
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
32
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
33 ==============================================================================
129
2983cde45542 updated for version 7.0044
vimboss
parents: 112
diff changeset
34 *41.1* Introduction *vim-script-intro* *script*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
35
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
36 Your first experience with Vim scripts is the vimrc file. Vim reads it when
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
37 it starts up and executes the commands. You can set options to values you
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
38 prefer. And you can use any colon command in it (commands that start with a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
39 ":"; these are sometimes referred to as Ex commands or command-line commands).
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
40 Syntax files are also Vim scripts. As are files that set options for a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
41 specific file type. A complicated macro can be defined by a separate Vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
42 script file. You can think of other uses yourself.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
43
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
44 Let's start with a simple example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
45
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
46 :let i = 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
47 :while i < 5
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
48 : echo "count is" i
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
49 : let i += 1
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
50 :endwhile
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
51 <
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
52 Note:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
53 The ":" characters are not really needed here. You only need to use
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
54 them when you type a command. In a Vim script file they can be left
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
55 out. We will use them here anyway to make clear these are colon
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
56 commands and make them stand out from Normal mode commands.
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
57 Note:
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
58 You can try out the examples by yanking the lines from the text here
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
59 and executing them with :@"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
60
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
61 The output of the example code is:
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
62
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
63 count is 1 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
64 count is 2 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
65 count is 3 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
66 count is 4 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
67
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
68 In the first line the ":let" command assigns a value to a variable. The
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
69 generic form is: >
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
70
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
71 :let {variable} = {expression}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
72
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
73 In this case the variable name is "i" and the expression is a simple value,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
74 the number one.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
75 The ":while" command starts a loop. The generic form is: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
76
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
77 :while {condition}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
78 : {statements}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
79 :endwhile
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
80
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
81 The statements until the matching ":endwhile" are executed for as long as the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
82 condition is true. The condition used here is the expression "i < 5". This
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
83 is true when the variable i is smaller than five.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
84 Note:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
85 If you happen to write a while loop that keeps on running, you can
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
86 interrupt it by pressing CTRL-C (CTRL-Break on MS-Windows).
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
87
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
88 The ":echo" command prints its arguments. In this case the string "count is"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
89 and the value of the variable i. Since i is one, this will print:
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
90
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
91 count is 1 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
92
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
93 Then there is the ":let i += 1" command. This does the same thing as
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
94 ":let i = i + 1". This adds one to the variable i and assigns the new value
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
95 to the same variable.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
96
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
97 The example was given to explain the commands, but would you really want to
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
98 make such a loop it can be written much more compact: >
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
99
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
100 :for i in range(1, 4)
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
101 : echo "count is" i
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
102 :endfor
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
103
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
104 We won't explain how |:for| and |range()| work until later. Follow the links
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
105 if you are impatient.
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
106
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
107
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
108 THREE KINDS OF NUMBERS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
109
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
110 Numbers can be decimal, hexadecimal or octal. A hexadecimal number starts
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
111 with "0x" or "0X". For example "0x1f" is decimal 31. An octal number starts
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
112 with a zero. "017" is decimal 15. Careful: don't put a zero before a decimal
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
113 number, it will be interpreted as an octal number!
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
114 The ":echo" command always prints decimal numbers. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
115
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
116 :echo 0x7f 036
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
117 < 127 30 ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
118
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
119 A number is made negative with a minus sign. This also works for hexadecimal
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
120 and octal numbers. A minus sign is also used for subtraction. Compare this
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
121 with the previous example: >
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
122
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
123 :echo 0x7f -036
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
124 < 97 ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
125
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
126 White space in an expression is ignored. However, it's recommended to use it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
127 for separating items, to make the expression easier to read. For example, to
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
128 avoid the confusion with a negative number above, put a space between the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
129 minus sign and the following number: >
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
130
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
131 :echo 0x7f - 036
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
132
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
133 ==============================================================================
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
134 *41.2* Variables
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
135
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
136 A variable name consists of ASCII letters, digits and the underscore. It
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
137 cannot start with a digit. Valid variable names are:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
138
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
139 counter
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
140 _aap3
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
141 very_long_variable_name_with_underscores
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
142 FuncLength
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
143 LENGTH
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
144
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
145 Invalid names are "foo+bar" and "6var".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
146 These variables are global. To see a list of currently defined variables
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
147 use this command: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
148
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
149 :let
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
150
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
151 You can use global variables everywhere. This also means that when the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
152 variable "count" is used in one script file, it might also be used in another
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
153 file. This leads to confusion at least, and real problems at worst. To avoid
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
154 this, you can use a variable local to a script file by prepending "s:". For
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
155 example, one script contains this code: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
156
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
157 :let s:count = 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
158 :while s:count < 5
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
159 : source other.vim
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
160 : let s:count += 1
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
161 :endwhile
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
162
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
163 Since "s:count" is local to this script, you can be sure that sourcing the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
164 "other.vim" script will not change this variable. If "other.vim" also uses an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
165 "s:count" variable, it will be a different copy, local to that script. More
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
166 about script-local variables here: |script-variable|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
167
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
168 There are more kinds of variables, see |internal-variables|. The most often
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
169 used ones are:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
170
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
171 b:name variable local to a buffer
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
172 w:name variable local to a window
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
173 g:name global variable (also in a function)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
174 v:name variable predefined by Vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
175
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
176
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
177 DELETING VARIABLES
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
178
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
179 Variables take up memory and show up in the output of the ":let" command. To
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
180 delete a variable use the ":unlet" command. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
181
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
182 :unlet s:count
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
183
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
184 This deletes the script-local variable "s:count" to free up the memory it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
185 uses. If you are not sure if the variable exists, and don't want an error
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
186 message when it doesn't, append !: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
187
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
188 :unlet! s:count
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
189
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
190 When a script finishes, the local variables used there will not be
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
191 automatically freed. The next time the script executes, it can still use the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
192 old value. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
193
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
194 :if !exists("s:call_count")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
195 : let s:call_count = 0
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
196 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
197 :let s:call_count = s:call_count + 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
198 :echo "called" s:call_count "times"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
199
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
200 The "exists()" function checks if a variable has already been defined. Its
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
201 argument is the name of the variable you want to check. Not the variable
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
202 itself! If you would do this: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
203
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
204 :if !exists(s:call_count)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
205
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
206 Then the value of s:call_count will be used as the name of the variable that
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
207 exists() checks. That's not what you want.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
208 The exclamation mark ! negates a value. When the value was true, it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
209 becomes false. When it was false, it becomes true. You can read it as "not".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
210 Thus "if !exists()" can be read as "if not exists()".
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
211 What Vim calls true is anything that is not zero. Zero is false.
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
212 Note:
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
213 Vim automatically converts a string to a number when it is looking for
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
214 a number. When using a string that doesn't start with a digit the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
215 resulting number is zero. Thus look out for this: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
216 :if "true"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
217 < The "true" will be interpreted as a zero, thus as false!
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
218
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
219
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
220 STRING VARIABLES AND CONSTANTS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
221
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
222 So far only numbers were used for the variable value. Strings can be used as
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
223 well. Numbers and strings are the basic types of variables that Vim supports.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
224 The type is dynamic, it is set each time when assigning a value to the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
225 variable with ":let". More about types in |41.8|.
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
226 To assign a string value to a variable, you need to use a string constant.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
227 There are two types of these. First the string in double quotes: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
228
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
229 :let name = "peter"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
230 :echo name
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
231 < peter ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
232
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
233 If you want to include a double quote inside the string, put a backslash in
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
234 front of it: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
235
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
236 :let name = "\"peter\""
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
237 :echo name
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
238 < "peter" ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
239
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
240 To avoid the need for a backslash, you can use a string in single quotes: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
241
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
242 :let name = '"peter"'
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
243 :echo name
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
244 < "peter" ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
245
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
246 Inside a single-quote string all the characters are as they are. Only the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
247 single quote itself is special: you need to use two to get one. A backslash
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
248 is taken literally, thus you can't use it to change the meaning of the
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
249 character after it.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
250 In double-quote strings it is possible to use special characters. Here are
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
251 a few useful ones:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
252
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
253 \t <Tab>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
254 \n <NL>, line break
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
255 \r <CR>, <Enter>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
256 \e <Esc>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
257 \b <BS>, backspace
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
258 \" "
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
259 \\ \, backslash
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
260 \<Esc> <Esc>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
261 \<C-W> CTRL-W
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
262
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
263 The last two are just examples. The "\<name>" form can be used to include
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
264 the special key "name".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
265 See |expr-quote| for the full list of special items in a string.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
266
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
267 ==============================================================================
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
268 *41.3* Expressions
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
269
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
270 Vim has a rich, yet simple way to handle expressions. You can read the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
271 definition here: |expression-syntax|. Here we will show the most common
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
272 items.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
273 The numbers, strings and variables mentioned above are expressions by
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
274 themselves. Thus everywhere an expression is expected, you can use a number,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
275 string or variable. Other basic items in an expression are:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
276
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
277 $NAME environment variable
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
278 &name option
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
279 @r register
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
280
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
281 Examples: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
282
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
283 :echo "The value of 'tabstop' is" &ts
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
284 :echo "Your home directory is" $HOME
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
285 :if @a > 5
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
286
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
287 The &name form can be used to save an option value, set it to a new value,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
288 do something and restore the old value. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
289
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
290 :let save_ic = &ic
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
291 :set noic
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
292 :/The Start/,$delete
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
293 :let &ic = save_ic
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
294
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
295 This makes sure the "The Start" pattern is used with the 'ignorecase' option
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
296 off. Still, it keeps the value that the user had set. (Another way to do
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
297 this would be to add "\C" to the pattern, see |/\C|.)
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
298
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
299
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
300 MATHEMATICS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
301
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
302 It becomes more interesting if we combine these basic items. Let's start with
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
303 mathematics on numbers:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
304
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
305 a + b add
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
306 a - b subtract
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
307 a * b multiply
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
308 a / b divide
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
309 a % b modulo
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
310
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
311 The usual precedence is used. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
312
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
313 :echo 10 + 5 * 2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
314 < 20 ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
315
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
316 Grouping is done with braces. No surprises here. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
317
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
318 :echo (10 + 5) * 2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
319 < 30 ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
320
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
321 Strings can be concatenated with ".". Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
322
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
323 :echo "foo" . "bar"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
324 < foobar ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
325
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
326 When the ":echo" command gets multiple arguments, it separates them with a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
327 space. In the example the argument is a single expression, thus no space is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
328 inserted.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
329
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
330 Borrowed from the C language is the conditional expression:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
331
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
332 a ? b : c
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
333
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
334 If "a" evaluates to true "b" is used, otherwise "c" is used. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
335
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
336 :let i = 4
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
337 :echo i > 5 ? "i is big" : "i is small"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
338 < i is small ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
339
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
340 The three parts of the constructs are always evaluated first, thus you could
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
341 see it work as:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
342
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
343 (a) ? (b) : (c)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
344
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
345 ==============================================================================
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
346 *41.4* Conditionals
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
347
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
348 The ":if" commands executes the following statements, until the matching
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
349 ":endif", only when a condition is met. The generic form is:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
350
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
351 :if {condition}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
352 {statements}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
353 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
354
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
355 Only when the expression {condition} evaluates to true (non-zero) will the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
356 {statements} be executed. These must still be valid commands. If they
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
357 contain garbage, Vim won't be able to find the ":endif".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
358 You can also use ":else". The generic form for this is:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
359
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
360 :if {condition}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
361 {statements}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
362 :else
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
363 {statements}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
364 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
365
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
366 The second {statements} is only executed if the first one isn't.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
367 Finally, there is ":elseif":
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
368
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
369 :if {condition}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
370 {statements}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
371 :elseif {condition}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
372 {statements}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
373 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
374
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
375 This works just like using ":else" and then "if", but without the need for an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
376 extra ":endif".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
377 A useful example for your vimrc file is checking the 'term' option and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
378 doing something depending upon its value: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
379
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
380 :if &term == "xterm"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
381 : " Do stuff for xterm
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
382 :elseif &term == "vt100"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
383 : " Do stuff for a vt100 terminal
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
384 :else
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
385 : " Do something for other terminals
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
386 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
387
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
388
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
389 LOGIC OPERATIONS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
390
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
391 We already used some of them in the examples. These are the most often used
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
392 ones:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
393
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
394 a == b equal to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
395 a != b not equal to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
396 a > b greater than
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
397 a >= b greater than or equal to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
398 a < b less than
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
399 a <= b less than or equal to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
400
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
401 The result is one if the condition is met and zero otherwise. An example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
402
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
403 :if v:version >= 700
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
404 : echo "congratulations"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
405 :else
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
406 : echo "you are using an old version, upgrade!"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
407 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
408
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
409 Here "v:version" is a variable defined by Vim, which has the value of the Vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
410 version. 600 is for version 6.0. Version 6.1 has the value 601. This is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
411 very useful to write a script that works with multiple versions of Vim.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
412 |v:version|
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
413
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
414 The logic operators work both for numbers and strings. When comparing two
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
415 strings, the mathematical difference is used. This compares byte values,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
416 which may not be right for some languages.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
417 When comparing a string with a number, the string is first converted to a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
418 number. This is a bit tricky, because when a string doesn't look like a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
419 number, the number zero is used. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
420
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
421 :if 0 == "one"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
422 : echo "yes"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
423 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
424
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
425 This will echo "yes", because "one" doesn't look like a number, thus it is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
426 converted to the number zero.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
427
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
428 For strings there are two more items:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
429
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
430 a =~ b matches with
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
431 a !~ b does not match with
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
432
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
433 The left item "a" is used as a string. The right item "b" is used as a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
434 pattern, like what's used for searching. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
435
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
436 :if str =~ " "
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
437 : echo "str contains a space"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
438 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
439 :if str !~ '\.$'
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
440 : echo "str does not end in a full stop"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
441 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
442
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
443 Notice the use of a single-quote string for the pattern. This is useful,
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
444 because backslashes would need to be doubled in a double-quote string and
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
445 patterns tend to contain many backslashes.
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
446
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
447 The 'ignorecase' option is used when comparing strings. When you don't want
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
448 that, append "#" to match case and "?" to ignore case. Thus "==?" compares
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
449 two strings to be equal while ignoring case. And "!~#" checks if a pattern
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
450 doesn't match, also checking the case of letters. For the full table see
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
451 |expr-==|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
452
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
453
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
454 MORE LOOPING
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
455
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
456 The ":while" command was already mentioned. Two more statements can be used
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
457 in between the ":while" and the ":endwhile":
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
458
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
459 :continue Jump back to the start of the while loop; the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
460 loop continues.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
461 :break Jump forward to the ":endwhile"; the loop is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
462 discontinued.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
463
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
464 Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
465
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
466 :while counter < 40
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
467 : call do_something()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
468 : if skip_flag
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
469 : continue
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
470 : endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
471 : if finished_flag
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
472 : break
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
473 : endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
474 : sleep 50m
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
475 :endwhile
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
476
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
477 The ":sleep" command makes Vim take a nap. The "50m" specifies fifty
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
478 milliseconds. Another example is ":sleep 4", which sleeps for four seconds.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
479
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
480 Even more looping can be done with the ":for" command, see below in |41.8|.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
481
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
482 ==============================================================================
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
483 *41.5* Executing an expression
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
484
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
485 So far the commands in the script were executed by Vim directly. The
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
486 ":execute" command allows executing the result of an expression. This is a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
487 very powerful way to build commands and execute them.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
488 An example is to jump to a tag, which is contained in a variable: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
489
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
490 :execute "tag " . tag_name
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
491
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
492 The "." is used to concatenate the string "tag " with the value of variable
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
493 "tag_name". Suppose "tag_name" has the value "get_cmd", then the command that
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
494 will be executed is: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
495
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
496 :tag get_cmd
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
497
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
498 The ":execute" command can only execute colon commands. The ":normal" command
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
499 executes Normal mode commands. However, its argument is not an expression but
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
500 the literal command characters. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
501
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
502 :normal gg=G
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
503
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
504 This jumps to the first line and formats all lines with the "=" operator.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
505 To make ":normal" work with an expression, combine ":execute" with it.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
506 Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
507
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
508 :execute "normal " . normal_commands
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
509
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
510 The variable "normal_commands" must contain the Normal mode commands.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
511 Make sure that the argument for ":normal" is a complete command. Otherwise
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
512 Vim will run into the end of the argument and abort the command. For example,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
513 if you start Insert mode, you must leave Insert mode as well. This works: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
514
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
515 :execute "normal Inew text \<Esc>"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
516
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
517 This inserts "new text " in the current line. Notice the use of the special
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
518 key "\<Esc>". This avoids having to enter a real <Esc> character in your
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
519 script.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
520
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
521 If you don't want to execute a string but evaluate it to get its expression
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
522 value, you can use the eval() function: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
523
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
524 :let optname = "path"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
525 :let optval = eval('&' . optname)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
526
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
527 A "&" character is prepended to "path", thus the argument to eval() is
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
528 "&path". The result will then be the value of the 'path' option.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
529 The same thing can be done with: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
530 :exe 'let optval = &' . optname
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
531
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
532 ==============================================================================
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
533 *41.6* Using functions
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
534
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
535 Vim defines many functions and provides a large amount of functionality that
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
536 way. A few examples will be given in this section. You can find the whole
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
537 list here: |functions|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
538
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
539 A function is called with the ":call" command. The parameters are passed in
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
540 between braces, separated by commas. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
541
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
542 :call search("Date: ", "W")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
543
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
544 This calls the search() function, with arguments "Date: " and "W". The
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
545 search() function uses its first argument as a search pattern and the second
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
546 one as flags. The "W" flag means the search doesn't wrap around the end of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
547 the file.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
548
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
549 A function can be called in an expression. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
550
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
551 :let line = getline(".")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
552 :let repl = substitute(line, '\a', "*", "g")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
553 :call setline(".", repl)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
554
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
555 The getline() function obtains a line from the current buffer. Its argument
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
556 is a specification of the line number. In this case "." is used, which means
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
557 the line where the cursor is.
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
558 The substitute() function does something similar to the ":substitute"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
559 command. The first argument is the string on which to perform the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
560 substitution. The second argument is the pattern, the third the replacement
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
561 string. Finally, the last arguments are the flags.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
562 The setline() function sets the line, specified by the first argument, to a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
563 new string, the second argument. In this example the line under the cursor is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
564 replaced with the result of the substitute(). Thus the effect of the three
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
565 statements is equal to: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
566
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
567 :substitute/\a/*/g
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
568
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
569 Using the functions becomes more interesting when you do more work before and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
570 after the substitute() call.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
571
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
572
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
573 FUNCTIONS *function-list*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
574
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
575 There are many functions. We will mention them here, grouped by what they are
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
576 used for. You can find an alphabetical list here: |functions|. Use CTRL-] on
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
577 the function name to jump to detailed help on it.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
578
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
579 String manipulation: *string-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
580 nr2char() get a character by its ASCII value
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
581 char2nr() get ASCII value of a character
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
582 str2nr() convert a string to a Number
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
583 str2float() convert a string to a Float
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
584 printf() format a string according to % items
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
585 escape() escape characters in a string with a '\'
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
586 shellescape() escape a string for use with a shell command
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
587 fnameescape() escape a file name for use with a Vim command
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
588 tr() translate characters from one set to another
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
589 strtrans() translate a string to make it printable
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
590 tolower() turn a string to lowercase
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
591 toupper() turn a string to uppercase
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
592 match() position where a pattern matches in a string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
593 matchend() position where a pattern match ends in a string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
594 matchstr() match of a pattern in a string
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
595 matchlist() like matchstr() and also return submatches
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
596 stridx() first index of a short string in a long string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
597 strridx() last index of a short string in a long string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
598 strlen() length of a string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
599 substitute() substitute a pattern match with a string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
600 submatch() get a specific match in a ":substitute"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
601 strpart() get part of a string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
602 expand() expand special keywords
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
603 iconv() convert text from one encoding to another
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
604 byteidx() byte index of a character in a string
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
605 repeat() repeat a string multiple times
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
606 eval() evaluate a string expression
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
607
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
608 List manipulation: *list-functions*
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
609 get() get an item without error for wrong index
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
610 len() number of items in a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
611 empty() check if List is empty
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
612 insert() insert an item somewhere in a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
613 add() append an item to a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
614 extend() append a List to a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
615 remove() remove one or more items from a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
616 copy() make a shallow copy of a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
617 deepcopy() make a full copy of a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
618 filter() remove selected items from a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
619 map() change each List item
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
620 sort() sort a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
621 reverse() reverse the order of a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
622 split() split a String into a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
623 join() join List items into a String
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
624 range() return a List with a sequence of numbers
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
625 string() String representation of a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
626 call() call a function with List as arguments
323
03b3684919e3 updated for version 7.0084
vimboss
parents: 270
diff changeset
627 index() index of a value in a List
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
628 max() maximum value in a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
629 min() minimum value in a List
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
630 count() count number of times a value appears in a List
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
631 repeat() repeat a List multiple times
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
632
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
633 Dictionary manipulation: *dict-functions*
323
03b3684919e3 updated for version 7.0084
vimboss
parents: 270
diff changeset
634 get() get an entry without an error for a wrong key
112
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
635 len() number of entries in a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
636 has_key() check whether a key appears in a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
637 empty() check if Dictionary is empty
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
638 remove() remove an entry from a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
639 extend() add entries from one Dictionary to another
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
640 filter() remove selected entries from a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
641 map() change each Dictionary entry
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
642 keys() get List of Dictionary keys
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
643 values() get List of Dictionary values
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
644 items() get List of Dictionary key-value pairs
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
645 copy() make a shallow copy of a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
646 deepcopy() make a full copy of a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
647 string() String representation of a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
648 max() maximum value in a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
649 min() minimum value in a Dictionary
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
650 count() count number of times a value appears
195c94b60e54 updated for version 7.0041
vimboss
parents: 48
diff changeset
651
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
652 Floating point computation: *float-functions*
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
653 float2nr() convert Float to Number
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
654 abs() absolute value (also works for Number)
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
655 round() round off
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
656 ceil() round up
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
657 floor() round down
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
658 trunc() remove value after decimal point
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
659 log10() logarithm to base 10
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
660 pow() value of x to the exponent y
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
661 sqrt() square root
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
662 sin() sine
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
663 cos() cosine
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
664 atan() arc tangent
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
665
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
666 Variables: *var-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
667 type() type of a variable
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
668 islocked() check if a variable is locked
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
669 function() get a Funcref for a function name
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
670 getbufvar() get a variable value from a specific buffer
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
671 setbufvar() set a variable in a specific buffer
831
f24a95dae8ee updated for version 7.0d05
vimboss
parents: 825
diff changeset
672 getwinvar() get a variable from specific window
2207
b17bbfa96fa0 Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2154
diff changeset
673 gettabvar() get a variable from specific tab page
831
f24a95dae8ee updated for version 7.0d05
vimboss
parents: 825
diff changeset
674 gettabwinvar() get a variable from specific window & tab page
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
675 setwinvar() set a variable in a specific window
2207
b17bbfa96fa0 Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2154
diff changeset
676 settabvar() set a variable in a specific tab page
831
f24a95dae8ee updated for version 7.0d05
vimboss
parents: 825
diff changeset
677 settabwinvar() set a variable in a specific window & tab page
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
678 garbagecollect() possibly free memory
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
679
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
680 Cursor and mark position: *cursor-functions* *mark-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
681 col() column number of the cursor or a mark
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
682 virtcol() screen column of the cursor or a mark
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
683 line() line number of the cursor or mark
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
684 wincol() window column number of the cursor
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
685 winline() window line number of the cursor
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
686 cursor() position the cursor at a line/column
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
687 getpos() get position of cursor, mark, etc.
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
688 setpos() set position of cursor, mark, etc.
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
689 byte2line() get line number at a specific byte count
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
690 line2byte() byte count at a specific line
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
691 diff_filler() get the number of filler lines above a line
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
692
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
693 Working with text in the current buffer: *text-functions*
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
694 getline() get a line or list of lines from the buffer
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
695 setline() replace a line in the buffer
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
696 append() append line or list of lines in the buffer
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
697 indent() indent of a specific line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
698 cindent() indent according to C indenting
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
699 lispindent() indent according to Lisp indenting
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
700 nextnonblank() find next non-blank line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
701 prevnonblank() find previous non-blank line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
702 search() find a match for a pattern
667
9090f866cd57 updated for version 7.0197
vimboss
parents: 647
diff changeset
703 searchpos() find a match for a pattern
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
704 searchpair() find the other end of a start/skip/end
667
9090f866cd57 updated for version 7.0197
vimboss
parents: 647
diff changeset
705 searchpairpos() find the other end of a start/skip/end
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
706 searchdecl() search for the declaration of a name
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
707
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
708 *system-functions* *file-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
709 System functions and manipulation of files:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
710 glob() expand wildcards
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
711 globpath() expand wildcards in a number of directories
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
712 findfile() find a file in a list of directories
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
713 finddir() find a directory in a list of directories
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
714 resolve() find out where a shortcut points to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
715 fnamemodify() modify a file name
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
716 pathshorten() shorten directory names in a path
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
717 simplify() simplify a path without changing its meaning
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
718 executable() check if an executable program exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
719 filereadable() check if a file can be read
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
720 filewritable() check if a file can be written to
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
721 getfperm() get the permissions of a file
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
722 getftype() get the kind of a file
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
723 isdirectory() check if a directory exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
724 getfsize() get the size of a file
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
725 getcwd() get the current working directory
1104
d75027183cf4 updated for version 7.0-230
vimboss
parents: 874
diff changeset
726 haslocaldir() check if current window used |:lcd|
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
727 tempname() get the name of a temporary file
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
728 mkdir() create a new directory
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
729 delete() delete a file
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
730 rename() rename a file
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
731 system() get the result of a shell command
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
732 hostname() name of the system
158
78423945b251 updated for version 7.0048
vimboss
parents: 129
diff changeset
733 readfile() read a file into a List of lines
78423945b251 updated for version 7.0048
vimboss
parents: 129
diff changeset
734 writefile() write a List of lines into a file
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
735
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
736 Date and Time: *date-functions* *time-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
737 getftime() get last modification time of a file
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
738 localtime() get current time in seconds
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
739 strftime() convert time to a string
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
740 reltime() get the current or elapsed time accurately
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
741 reltimestr() convert reltime() result to a string
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
742
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
743 *buffer-functions* *window-functions* *arg-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
744 Buffers, windows and the argument list:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
745 argc() number of entries in the argument list
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
746 argidx() current position in the argument list
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
747 argv() get one entry from the argument list
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
748 bufexists() check if a buffer exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
749 buflisted() check if a buffer exists and is listed
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
750 bufloaded() check if a buffer exists and is loaded
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
751 bufname() get the name of a specific buffer
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
752 bufnr() get the buffer number of a specific buffer
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
753 tabpagebuflist() return List of buffers in a tab page
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
754 tabpagenr() get the number of a tab page
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
755 tabpagewinnr() like winnr() for a specified tab page
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
756 winnr() get the window number for the current window
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
757 bufwinnr() get the window number of a specific buffer
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
758 winbufnr() get the buffer number of a specific window
434
9595cf1d80a7 updated for version 7.0112
vimboss
parents: 323
diff changeset
759 getbufline() get a list of lines from the specified buffer
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
760
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
761 Command line: *command-line-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
762 getcmdline() get the current command line
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
763 getcmdpos() get position of the cursor in the command line
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
764 setcmdpos() set position of the cursor in the command line
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
765 getcmdtype() return the current command-line type
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
766
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
767 Quickfix and location lists: *quickfix-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
768 getqflist() list of quickfix errors
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
769 setqflist() modify a quickfix list
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
770 getloclist() list of location list items
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
771 setloclist() modify a location list
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
772
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
773 Insert mode completion: *completion-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
774 complete() set found matches
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
775 complete_add() add to found matches
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
776 complete_check() check if completion should be aborted
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
777 pumvisible() check if the popup menu is displayed
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
778
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
779 Folding: *folding-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
780 foldclosed() check for a closed fold at a specific line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
781 foldclosedend() like foldclosed() but return the last line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
782 foldlevel() check for the fold level at a specific line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
783 foldtext() generate the line displayed for a closed fold
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
784 foldtextresult() get the text displayed for a closed fold
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
785
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
786 Syntax and highlighting: *syntax-functions* *highlighting-functions*
1326
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
787 clearmatches() clear all matches defined by |matchadd()| and
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
788 the |:match| commands
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
789 getmatches() get all matches defined by |matchadd()| and
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
790 the |:match| commands
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
791 hlexists() check if a highlight group exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
792 hlID() get ID of a highlight group
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
793 synID() get syntax ID at a specific position
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
794 synIDattr() get a specific attribute of a syntax ID
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
795 synIDtrans() get translated syntax ID
2642
840c3cadb842 Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2577
diff changeset
796 synstack() get list of syntax IDs at a specific position
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
797 diff_hlID() get highlight ID for diff mode at a position
1326
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
798 matchadd() define a pattern to highlight (a "match")
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
799 matcharg() get info about |:match| arguments
1326
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
800 matchdelete() delete a match defined by |matchadd()| or a
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
801 |:match| command
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
802 setmatches() restore a list of matches saved by
22886f3d882d updated for version 7.1-040
vimboss
parents: 1252
diff changeset
803 |getmatches()|
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
804
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
805 Spelling: *spell-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
806 spellbadword() locate badly spelled word at or after cursor
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
807 spellsuggest() return suggested spelling corrections
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
808 soundfold() return the sound-a-like equivalent of a word
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
809
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
810 History: *history-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
811 histadd() add an item to a history
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
812 histdel() delete an item from a history
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
813 histget() get an item from a history
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
814 histnr() get highest index of a history list
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
815
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
816 Interactive: *interactive-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
817 browse() put up a file requester
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
818 browsedir() put up a directory requester
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
819 confirm() let the user make a choice
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
820 getchar() get a character from the user
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
821 getcharmod() get modifiers for the last typed character
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
822 feedkeys() put characters in the typeahead queue
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
823 input() get a line from the user
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
824 inputlist() let the user pick an entry from a list
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
825 inputsecret() get a line from the user without showing it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
826 inputdialog() get a line from the user in a dialog
230
9281a51ca7a2 updated for version 7.0064
vimboss
parents: 211
diff changeset
827 inputsave() save and clear typeahead
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
828 inputrestore() restore typeahead
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
829
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
830 GUI: *gui-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
831 getfontname() get name of current font being used
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
832 getwinposx() X position of the GUI Vim window
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
833 getwinposy() Y position of the GUI Vim window
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
834
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
835 Vim server: *server-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
836 serverlist() return the list of server names
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
837 remote_send() send command characters to a Vim server
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
838 remote_expr() evaluate an expression in a Vim server
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
839 server2client() send a reply to a client of a Vim server
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
840 remote_peek() check if there is a reply from a Vim server
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
841 remote_read() read a reply from a Vim server
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
842 foreground() move the Vim window to the foreground
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
843 remote_foreground() move the Vim server window to the foreground
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
844
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
845 Window size and position: *window-size-functions*
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
846 winheight() get height of a specific window
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
847 winwidth() get width of a specific window
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
848 winrestcmd() return command to restore window sizes
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
849 winsaveview() get view of current window
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
850 winrestview() restore saved view of current window
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
851
2301
6f63294a1781 Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2207
diff changeset
852 Various: *various-functions*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
853 mode() get current editing mode
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
854 visualmode() last visual mode used
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
855 hasmapto() check if a mapping exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
856 mapcheck() check if a matching mapping exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
857 maparg() get rhs of a mapping
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
858 exists() check if a variable, function, etc. exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
859 has() check if a feature is supported in Vim
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
860 changenr() return number of most recent change
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
861 cscope_connection() check if a cscope connection exists
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
862 did_filetype() check if a FileType autocommand was used
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
863 eventhandler() check if invoked by an event handler
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
864 getpid() get process ID of Vim
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
865
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
866 libcall() call a function in an external library
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
867 libcallnr() idem, returning a number
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
868
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
869 getreg() get contents of a register
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
870 getregtype() get type of a register
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
871 setreg() set contents and type of a register
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
872
211
79c3648993c3 updated for version 7.0060
vimboss
parents: 170
diff changeset
873 taglist() get list of matching tags
824
8dd456c1e283 updated for version 7.0c13
vimboss
parents: 810
diff changeset
874 tagfiles() get a list of tags files
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
875
2050
afcf9db31561 updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents: 1702
diff changeset
876 mzeval() evaluate |MzScheme| expression
afcf9db31561 updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents: 1702
diff changeset
877
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
878 ==============================================================================
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
879 *41.7* Defining a function
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
880
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
881 Vim enables you to define your own functions. The basic function declaration
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
882 begins as follows: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
883
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
884 :function {name}({var1}, {var2}, ...)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
885 : {body}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
886 :endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
887 <
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
888 Note:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
889 Function names must begin with a capital letter.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
890
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
891 Let's define a short function to return the smaller of two numbers. It starts
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
892 with this line: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
893
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
894 :function Min(num1, num2)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
895
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
896 This tells Vim that the function is named "Min" and it takes two arguments:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
897 "num1" and "num2".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
898 The first thing you need to do is to check to see which number is smaller:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
899 >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
900 : if a:num1 < a:num2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
901
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
902 The special prefix "a:" tells Vim that the variable is a function argument.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
903 Let's assign the variable "smaller" the value of the smallest number: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
904
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
905 : if a:num1 < a:num2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
906 : let smaller = a:num1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
907 : else
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
908 : let smaller = a:num2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
909 : endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
910
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
911 The variable "smaller" is a local variable. Variables used inside a function
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
912 are local unless prefixed by something like "g:", "a:", or "s:".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
913
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
914 Note:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
915 To access a global variable from inside a function you must prepend
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
916 "g:" to it. Thus "g:today" inside a function is used for the global
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
917 variable "today", and "today" is another variable, local to the
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
918 function.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
919
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
920 You now use the ":return" statement to return the smallest number to the user.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
921 Finally, you end the function: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
922
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
923 : return smaller
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
924 :endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
925
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
926 The complete function definition is as follows: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
927
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
928 :function Min(num1, num2)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
929 : if a:num1 < a:num2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
930 : let smaller = a:num1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
931 : else
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
932 : let smaller = a:num2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
933 : endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
934 : return smaller
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
935 :endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
936
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
937 For people who like short functions, this does the same thing: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
938
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
939 :function Min(num1, num2)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
940 : if a:num1 < a:num2
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
941 : return a:num1
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
942 : endif
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
943 : return a:num2
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
944 :endfunction
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
945
681
9364d114ed8d updated for version 7.0204
vimboss
parents: 667
diff changeset
946 A user defined function is called in exactly the same way as a built-in
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
947 function. Only the name is different. The Min function can be used like
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
948 this: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
949
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
950 :echo Min(5, 8)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
951
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
952 Only now will the function be executed and the lines be interpreted by Vim.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
953 If there are mistakes, like using an undefined variable or function, you will
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
954 now get an error message. When defining the function these errors are not
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
955 detected.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
956
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
957 When a function reaches ":endfunction" or ":return" is used without an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
958 argument, the function returns zero.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
959
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
960 To redefine a function that already exists, use the ! for the ":function"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
961 command: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
962
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
963 :function! Min(num1, num2, num3)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
964
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
965
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
966 USING A RANGE
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
967
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
968 The ":call" command can be given a line range. This can have one of two
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
969 meanings. When a function has been defined with the "range" keyword, it will
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
970 take care of the line range itself.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
971 The function will be passed the variables "a:firstline" and "a:lastline".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
972 These will have the line numbers from the range the function was called with.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
973 Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
974
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
975 :function Count_words() range
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
976 : let lnum = a:firstline
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
977 : let n = 0
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
978 : while lnum <= a:lastline
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
979 : let n = n + len(split(getline(lnum)))
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
980 : let lnum = lnum + 1
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
981 : endwhile
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
982 : echo "found " . n . " words"
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
983 :endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
984
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
985 You can call this function with: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
986
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
987 :10,30call Count_words()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
988
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
989 It will be executed once and echo the number of words.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
990 The other way to use a line range is by defining a function without the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
991 "range" keyword. The function will be called once for every line in the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
992 range, with the cursor in that line. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
993
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
994 :function Number()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
995 : echo "line " . line(".") . " contains: " . getline(".")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
996 :endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
997
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
998 If you call this function with: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
999
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1000 :10,15call Number()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1001
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1002 The function will be called six times.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1003
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1004
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1005 VARIABLE NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1006
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1007 Vim enables you to define functions that have a variable number of arguments.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1008 The following command, for instance, defines a function that must have 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1009 argument (start) and can have up to 20 additional arguments: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1010
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1011 :function Show(start, ...)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1012
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1013 The variable "a:1" contains the first optional argument, "a:2" the second, and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1014 so on. The variable "a:0" contains the number of extra arguments.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1015 For example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1016
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1017 :function Show(start, ...)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1018 : echohl Title
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1019 : echo "Show is " . a:start
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1020 : echohl None
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1021 : let index = 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1022 : while index <= a:0
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1023 : echo " Arg " . index . " is " . a:{index}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1024 : let index = index + 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1025 : endwhile
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1026 : echo ""
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1027 :endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1028
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1029 This uses the ":echohl" command to specify the highlighting used for the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1030 following ":echo" command. ":echohl None" stops it again. The ":echon"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1031 command works like ":echo", but doesn't output a line break.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1032
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1033 You can also use the a:000 variable, it is a List of all the "..." arguments.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1034 See |a:000|.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1035
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1036
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1037 LISTING FUNCTIONS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1038
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1039 The ":function" command lists the names and arguments of all user-defined
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1040 functions: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1041
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1042 :function
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1043 < function Show(start, ...) ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1044 function GetVimIndent() ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1045 function SetSyn(name) ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1046
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1047 To see what a function does, use its name as an argument for ":function": >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1048
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1049 :function SetSyn
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1050 < 1 if &syntax == '' ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1051 2 let &syntax = a:name ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1052 3 endif ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1053 endfunction ~
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1054
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1055
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1056 DEBUGGING
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1057
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1058 The line number is useful for when you get an error message or when debugging.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1059 See |debug-scripts| about debugging mode.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1060 You can also set the 'verbose' option to 12 or higher to see all function
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1061 calls. Set it to 15 or higher to see every executed line.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1062
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1063
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1064 DELETING A FUNCTION
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1065
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1066 To delete the Show() function: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1067
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1068 :delfunction Show
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1069
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1070 You get an error when the function doesn't exist.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1071
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1072
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1073 FUNCTION REFERENCES
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1074
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1075 Sometimes it can be useful to have a variable point to one function or
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1076 another. You can do it with the function() function. It turns the name of a
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1077 function into a reference: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1078
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1079 :let result = 0 " or 1
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1080 :function! Right()
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1081 : return 'Right!'
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1082 :endfunc
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1083 :function! Wrong()
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1084 : return 'Wrong!'
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1085 :endfunc
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1086 :
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1087 :if result == 1
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1088 : let Afunc = function('Right')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1089 :else
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1090 : let Afunc = function('Wrong')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1091 :endif
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1092 :echo call(Afunc, [])
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1093 < Wrong! ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1094
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1095 Note that the name of a variable that holds a function reference must start
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1096 with a capital. Otherwise it could be confused with the name of a builtin
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1097 function.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1098 The way to invoke a function that a variable refers to is with the call()
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1099 function. Its first argument is the function reference, the second argument
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1100 is a List with arguments.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1101
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1102 Function references are most useful in combination with a Dictionary, as is
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1103 explained in the next section.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1104
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1105 ==============================================================================
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1106 *41.8* Lists and Dictionaries
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1107
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1108 So far we have used the basic types String and Number. Vim also supports two
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1109 composite types: List and Dictionary.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1110
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1111 A List is an ordered sequence of things. The things can be any kind of value,
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1112 thus you can make a List of numbers, a List of Lists and even a List of mixed
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1113 items. To create a List with three strings: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1114
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1115 :let alist = ['aap', 'mies', 'noot']
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1116
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1117 The List items are enclosed in square brackets and separated by commas. To
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1118 create an empty List: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1119
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1120 :let alist = []
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1121
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1122 You can add items to a List with the add() function: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1123
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1124 :let alist = []
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1125 :call add(alist, 'foo')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1126 :call add(alist, 'bar')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1127 :echo alist
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1128 < ['foo', 'bar'] ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1129
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1130 List concatenation is done with +: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1131
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1132 :echo alist + ['foo', 'bar']
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1133 < ['foo', 'bar', 'foo', 'bar'] ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1134
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1135 Or, if you want to extend a List directly: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1136
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1137 :let alist = ['one']
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1138 :call extend(alist, ['two', 'three'])
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1139 :echo alist
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1140 < ['one', 'two', 'three'] ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1141
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1142 Notice that using add() will have a different effect: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1143
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1144 :let alist = ['one']
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1145 :call add(alist, ['two', 'three'])
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1146 :echo alist
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1147 < ['one', ['two', 'three']] ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1148
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1149 The second argument of add() is added as a single item.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1150
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1151
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1152 FOR LOOP
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1153
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1154 One of the nice things you can do with a List is iterate over it: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1155
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1156 :let alist = ['one', 'two', 'three']
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1157 :for n in alist
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1158 : echo n
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1159 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1160 < one ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1161 two ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1162 three ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1163
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1164 This will loop over each element in List "alist", assigning the value to
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1165 variable "n". The generic form of a for loop is: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1166
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1167 :for {varname} in {listexpression}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1168 : {commands}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1169 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1170
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1171 To loop a certain number of times you need a List of a specific length. The
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1172 range() function creates one for you: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1173
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1174 :for a in range(3)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1175 : echo a
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1176 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1177 < 0 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1178 1 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1179 2 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1180
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1181 Notice that the first item of the List that range() produces is zero, thus the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1182 last item is one less than the length of the list.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1183 You can also specify the maximum value, the stride and even go backwards: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1184
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1185 :for a in range(8, 4, -2)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1186 : echo a
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1187 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1188 < 8 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1189 6 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1190 4 ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1191
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1192 A more useful example, looping over lines in the buffer: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1193
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1194 :for line in getline(1, 20)
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1195 : if line =~ "Date: "
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1196 : echo matchstr(line, 'Date: \zs.*')
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1197 : endif
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1198 :endfor
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1199
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1200 This looks into lines 1 to 20 (inclusive) and echoes any date found in there.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1201
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1202
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1203 DICTIONARIES
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1204
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1205 A Dictionary stores key-value pairs. You can quickly lookup a value if you
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1206 know the key. A Dictionary is created with curly braces: >
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
1207
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1208 :let uk2nl = {'one': 'een', 'two': 'twee', 'three': 'drie'}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1209
164
8b0ee9d57d7f updated for version 7.0050
vimboss
parents: 161
diff changeset
1210 Now you can lookup words by putting the key in square brackets: >
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1211
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1212 :echo uk2nl['two']
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1213 < twee ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1214
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1215 The generic form for defining a Dictionary is: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1216
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1217 {<key> : <value>, ...}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1218
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1219 An empty Dictionary is one without any keys: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1220
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1221 {}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1222
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1223 The possibilities with Dictionaries are numerous. There are various functions
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1224 for them as well. For example, you can obtain a list of the keys and loop
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1225 over them: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1226
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1227 :for key in keys(uk2nl)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1228 : echo key
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1229 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1230 < three ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1231 one ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1232 two ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1233
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
1234 You will notice the keys are not ordered. You can sort the list to get a
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1235 specific order: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1236
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1237 :for key in sort(keys(uk2nl))
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1238 : echo key
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1239 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1240 < one ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1241 three ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1242 two ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1243
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1244 But you can never get back the order in which items are defined. For that you
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1245 need to use a List, it stores items in an ordered sequence.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1246
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1247
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1248 DICTIONARY FUNCTIONS
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1249
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1250 The items in a Dictionary can normally be obtained with an index in square
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1251 brackets: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1252
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1253 :echo uk2nl['one']
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1254 < een ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1255
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1256 A method that does the same, but without so many punctuation characters: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1257
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1258 :echo uk2nl.one
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1259 < een ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1260
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1261 This only works for a key that is made of ASCII letters, digits and the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1262 underscore. You can also assign a new value this way: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1263
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1264 :let uk2nl.four = 'vier'
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1265 :echo uk2nl
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1266 < {'three': 'drie', 'four': 'vier', 'one': 'een', 'two': 'twee'} ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1267
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1268 And now for something special: you can directly define a function and store a
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1269 reference to it in the dictionary: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1270
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1271 :function uk2nl.translate(line) dict
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1272 : return join(map(split(a:line), 'get(self, v:val, "???")'))
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1273 :endfunction
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1274
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1275 Let's first try it out: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1276
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1277 :echo uk2nl.translate('three two five one')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1278 < drie twee ??? een ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1279
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1280 The first special thing you notice is the "dict" at the end of the ":function"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1281 line. This marks the function as being used from a Dictionary. The "self"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1282 local variable will then refer to that Dictionary.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1283 Now let's break up the complicated return command: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1284
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1285 split(a:line)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1286
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1287 The split() function takes a string, chops it into white separated words
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1288 and returns a list with these words. Thus in the example it returns: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1289
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1290 :echo split('three two five one')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1291 < ['three', 'two', 'five', 'one'] ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1292
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1293 This list is the first argument to the map() function. This will go through
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1294 the list, evaluating its second argument with "v:val" set to the value of each
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1295 item. This is a shortcut to using a for loop. This command: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1296
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1297 :let alist = map(split(a:line), 'get(self, v:val, "???")')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1298
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1299 Is equivalent to: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1300
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1301 :let alist = split(a:line)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1302 :for idx in range(len(alist))
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1303 : let alist[idx] = get(self, alist[idx], "???")
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1304 :endfor
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1305
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1306 The get() function checks if a key is present in a Dictionary. If it is, then
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1307 the value is retrieved. If it isn't, then the default value is returned, in
164
8b0ee9d57d7f updated for version 7.0050
vimboss
parents: 161
diff changeset
1308 the example it's '???'. This is a convenient way to handle situations where a
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1309 key may not be present and you don't want an error message.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1310
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1311 The join() function does the opposite of split(): it joins together a list of
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1312 words, putting a space in between.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1313 This combination of split(), map() and join() is a nice way to filter a line
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1314 of words in a very compact way.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1315
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1316
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1317 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1318
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1319 Now that you can put both values and functions in a Dictionary, you can
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1320 actually use a Dictionary like an object.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1321 Above we used a Dictionary for translating Dutch to English. We might want
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1322 to do the same for other languages. Let's first make an object (aka
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1323 Dictionary) that has the translate function, but no words to translate: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1324
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1325 :let transdict = {}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1326 :function transdict.translate(line) dict
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1327 : return join(map(split(a:line), 'get(self.words, v:val, "???")'))
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1328 :endfunction
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1329
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1330 It's slightly different from the function above, using 'self.words' to lookup
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1331 word translations. But we don't have a self.words. Thus you could call this
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1332 an abstract class.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1333
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1334 Now we can instantiate a Dutch translation object: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1335
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1336 :let uk2nl = copy(transdict)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1337 :let uk2nl.words = {'one': 'een', 'two': 'twee', 'three': 'drie'}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1338 :echo uk2nl.translate('three one')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1339 < drie een ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1340
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1341 And a German translator: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1342
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1343 :let uk2de = copy(transdict)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1344 :let uk2de.words = {'one': 'ein', 'two': 'zwei', 'three': 'drei'}
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1345 :echo uk2de.translate('three one')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1346 < drei ein ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1347
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1348 You see that the copy() function is used to make a copy of the "transdict"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1349 Dictionary and then the copy is changed to add the words. The original
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1350 remains the same, of course.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1351
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1352 Now you can go one step further, and use your preferred translator: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1353
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1354 :if $LANG =~ "de"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1355 : let trans = uk2de
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1356 :else
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1357 : let trans = uk2nl
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1358 :endif
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1359 :echo trans.translate('one two three')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1360 < een twee drie ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1361
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1362 Here "trans" refers to one of the two objects (Dictionaries). No copy is
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1363 made. More about List and Dictionary identity can be found at |list-identity|
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1364 and |dict-identity|.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1365
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1366 Now you might use a language that isn't supported. You can overrule the
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1367 translate() function to do nothing: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1368
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1369 :let uk2uk = copy(transdict)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1370 :function! uk2uk.translate(line)
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1371 : return a:line
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1372 :endfunction
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1373 :echo uk2uk.translate('three one wladiwostok')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1374 < three one wladiwostok ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1375
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1376 Notice that a ! was used to overwrite the existing function reference. Now
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1377 use "uk2uk" when no recognized language is found: >
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1378
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1379 :if $LANG =~ "de"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1380 : let trans = uk2de
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1381 :elseif $LANG =~ "nl"
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1382 : let trans = uk2nl
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1383 :else
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1384 : let trans = uk2uk
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1385 :endif
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1386 :echo trans.translate('one two three')
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1387 < one two three ~
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1388
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1389 For further reading see |Lists| and |Dictionaries|.
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1390
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1391 ==============================================================================
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1392 *41.9* Exceptions
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1393
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1394 Let's start with an example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1395
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1396 :try
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1397 : read ~/templates/pascal.tmpl
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1398 :catch /E484:/
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1399 : echo "Sorry, the Pascal template file cannot be found."
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1400 :endtry
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1401
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1402 The ":read" command will fail if the file does not exist. Instead of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1403 generating an error message, this code catches the error and gives the user a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1404 nice message instead.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1405
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1406 For the commands in between ":try" and ":endtry" errors are turned into
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1407 exceptions. An exception is a string. In the case of an error the string
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1408 contains the error message. And every error message has a number. In this
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1409 case, the error we catch contains "E484:". This number is guaranteed to stay
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1410 the same (the text may change, e.g., it may be translated).
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1411
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1412 When the ":read" command causes another error, the pattern "E484:" will not
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1413 match in it. Thus this exception will not be caught and result in the usual
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1414 error message.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1415
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1416 You might be tempted to do this: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1417
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1418 :try
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1419 : read ~/templates/pascal.tmpl
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1420 :catch
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1421 : echo "Sorry, the Pascal template file cannot be found."
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1422 :endtry
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1423
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1424 This means all errors are caught. But then you will not see errors that are
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1425 useful, such as "E21: Cannot make changes, 'modifiable' is off".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1426
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1427 Another useful mechanism is the ":finally" command: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1428
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1429 :let tmp = tempname()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1430 :try
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1431 : exe ".,$write " . tmp
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1432 : exe "!filter " . tmp
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1433 : .,$delete
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1434 : exe "$read " . tmp
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1435 :finally
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1436 : call delete(tmp)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1437 :endtry
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1438
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1439 This filters the lines from the cursor until the end of the file through the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1440 "filter" command, which takes a file name argument. No matter if the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1441 filtering works, something goes wrong in between ":try" and ":finally" or the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1442 user cancels the filtering by pressing CTRL-C, the "call delete(tmp)" is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1443 always executed. This makes sure you don't leave the temporary file behind.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1444
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1445 More information about exception handling can be found in the reference
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1446 manual: |exception-handling|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1447
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1448 ==============================================================================
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1449 *41.10* Various remarks
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1450
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1451 Here is a summary of items that apply to Vim scripts. They are also mentioned
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1452 elsewhere, but form a nice checklist.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1453
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1454 The end-of-line character depends on the system. For Unix a single <NL>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1455 character is used. For MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2 and the like, <CR><LF> is used.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1456 This is important when using mappings that end in a <CR>. See |:source_crnl|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1457
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1458
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1459 WHITE SPACE
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1460
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1461 Blank lines are allowed and ignored.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1462
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1463 Leading whitespace characters (blanks and TABs) are always ignored. The
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1464 whitespaces between parameters (e.g. between the 'set' and the 'cpoptions' in
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1465 the example below) are reduced to one blank character and plays the role of a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1466 separator, the whitespaces after the last (visible) character may or may not
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1467 be ignored depending on the situation, see below.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1468
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1469 For a ":set" command involving the "=" (equal) sign, such as in: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1470
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1471 :set cpoptions =aABceFst
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1472
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1473 the whitespace immediately before the "=" sign is ignored. But there can be
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1474 no whitespace after the "=" sign!
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1475
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1476 To include a whitespace character in the value of an option, it must be
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1477 escaped by a "\" (backslash) as in the following example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1478
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1479 :set tags=my\ nice\ file
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1480
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1481 The same example written as >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1482
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1483 :set tags=my nice file
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1484
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1485 will issue an error, because it is interpreted as: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1486
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1487 :set tags=my
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1488 :set nice
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1489 :set file
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1490
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1491
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1492 COMMENTS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1493
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1494 The character " (the double quote mark) starts a comment. Everything after
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1495 and including this character until the end-of-line is considered a comment and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1496 is ignored, except for commands that don't consider comments, as shown in
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1497 examples below. A comment can start on any character position on the line.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1498
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1499 There is a little "catch" with comments for some commands. Examples: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1500
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1501 :abbrev dev development " shorthand
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1502 :map <F3> o#include " insert include
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1503 :execute cmd " do it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1504 :!ls *.c " list C files
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1505
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1506 The abbreviation 'dev' will be expanded to 'development " shorthand'. The
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1507 mapping of <F3> will actually be the whole line after the 'o# ....' including
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1508 the '" insert include'. The "execute" command will give an error. The "!"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1509 command will send everything after it to the shell, causing an error for an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1510 unmatched '"' character.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1511 There can be no comment after ":map", ":abbreviate", ":execute" and "!"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1512 commands (there are a few more commands with this restriction). For the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1513 ":map", ":abbreviate" and ":execute" commands there is a trick: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1514
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1515 :abbrev dev development|" shorthand
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1516 :map <F3> o#include|" insert include
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1517 :execute cmd |" do it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1518
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1519 With the '|' character the command is separated from the next one. And that
1146
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1520 next command is only a comment. For the last command you need to do two
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1521 things: |:execute| and use '|': >
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1522 :exe '!ls *.c' |" list C files
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1523
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1524 Notice that there is no white space before the '|' in the abbreviation and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1525 mapping. For these commands, any character until the end-of-line or '|' is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1526 included. As a consequence of this behavior, you don't always see that
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1527 trailing whitespace is included: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1528
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1529 :map <F4> o#include
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1530
1146
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1531 To spot these problems, you can set the 'list' option when editing vimrc
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1532 files.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1533
1146
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1534 For Unix there is one special way to comment a line, that allows making a Vim
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1535 script executable: >
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1536 #!/usr/bin/env vim -S
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1537 echo "this is a Vim script"
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1538 quit
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1539
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1540 The "#" command by itself lists a line with the line number. Adding an
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1541 exclamation mark changes it into doing nothing, so that you can add the shell
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1542 command to execute the rest of the file. |:#!| |-S|
0e8da252bda1 updated for version 7.1a
vimboss
parents: 1104
diff changeset
1543
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1544
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1545 PITFALLS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1546
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1547 Even bigger problem arises in the following example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1548
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1549 :map ,ab o#include
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1550 :unmap ,ab
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1551
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1552 Here the unmap command will not work, because it tries to unmap ",ab ". This
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1553 does not exist as a mapped sequence. An error will be issued, which is very
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1554 hard to identify, because the ending whitespace character in ":unmap ,ab " is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1555 not visible.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1556
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1557 And this is the same as what happens when one uses a comment after an 'unmap'
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1558 command: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1559
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1560 :unmap ,ab " comment
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1561
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1562 Here the comment part will be ignored. However, Vim will try to unmap
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1563 ',ab ', which does not exist. Rewrite it as: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1564
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1565 :unmap ,ab| " comment
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1566
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1567
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1568 RESTORING THE VIEW
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1569
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1570 Sometimes you want to make a change and go back to where cursor was.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1571 Restoring the relative position would also be nice, so that the same line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1572 appears at the top of the window.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1573 This example yanks the current line, puts it above the first line in the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1574 file and then restores the view: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1575
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1576 map ,p ma"aYHmbgg"aP`bzt`a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1577
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1578 What this does: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1579 ma"aYHmbgg"aP`bzt`a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1580 < ma set mark a at cursor position
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1581 "aY yank current line into register a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1582 Hmb go to top line in window and set mark b there
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1583 gg go to first line in file
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1584 "aP put the yanked line above it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1585 `b go back to top line in display
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1586 zt position the text in the window as before
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1587 `a go back to saved cursor position
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1588
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1589
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1590 PACKAGING
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1591
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1592 To avoid your function names to interfere with functions that you get from
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1593 others, use this scheme:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1594 - Prepend a unique string before each function name. I often use an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1595 abbreviation. For example, "OW_" is used for the option window functions.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1596 - Put the definition of your functions together in a file. Set a global
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1597 variable to indicate that the functions have been loaded. When sourcing the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1598 file again, first unload the functions.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1599 Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1600
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1601 " This is the XXX package
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1602
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1603 if exists("XXX_loaded")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1604 delfun XXX_one
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1605 delfun XXX_two
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1606 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1607
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1608 function XXX_one(a)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1609 ... body of function ...
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1610 endfun
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1611
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1612 function XXX_two(b)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1613 ... body of function ...
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1614 endfun
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1615
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1616 let XXX_loaded = 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1617
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1618 ==============================================================================
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
1619 *41.11* Writing a plugin *write-plugin*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1620
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1621 You can write a Vim script in such a way that many people can use it. This is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1622 called a plugin. Vim users can drop your script in their plugin directory and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1623 use its features right away |add-plugin|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1624
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1625 There are actually two types of plugins:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1626
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1627 global plugins: For all types of files.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1628 filetype plugins: Only for files of a specific type.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1629
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1630 In this section the first type is explained. Most items are also relevant for
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1631 writing filetype plugins. The specifics for filetype plugins are in the next
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1632 section |write-filetype-plugin|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1633
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1634
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1635 NAME
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1636
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1637 First of all you must choose a name for your plugin. The features provided
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1638 by the plugin should be clear from its name. And it should be unlikely that
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1639 someone else writes a plugin with the same name but which does something
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1640 different. And please limit the name to 8 characters, to avoid problems on
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1641 old Windows systems.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1642
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1643 A script that corrects typing mistakes could be called "typecorr.vim". We
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1644 will use it here as an example.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1645
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1646 For the plugin to work for everybody, it should follow a few guidelines. This
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1647 will be explained step-by-step. The complete example plugin is at the end.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1648
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1649
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1650 BODY
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1651
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1652 Let's start with the body of the plugin, the lines that do the actual work: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1653
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1654 14 iabbrev teh the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1655 15 iabbrev otehr other
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1656 16 iabbrev wnat want
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1657 17 iabbrev synchronisation
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1658 18 \ synchronization
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1659 19 let s:count = 4
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1660
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1661 The actual list should be much longer, of course.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1662
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1663 The line numbers have only been added to explain a few things, don't put them
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1664 in your plugin file!
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1665
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1666
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1667 HEADER
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1668
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1669 You will probably add new corrections to the plugin and soon have several
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1670 versions laying around. And when distributing this file, people will want to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1671 know who wrote this wonderful plugin and where they can send remarks.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1672 Therefore, put a header at the top of your plugin: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1673
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1674 1 " Vim global plugin for correcting typing mistakes
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1675 2 " Last Change: 2000 Oct 15
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1676 3 " Maintainer: Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1677
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1678 About copyright and licensing: Since plugins are very useful and it's hardly
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1679 worth restricting their distribution, please consider making your plugin
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1680 either public domain or use the Vim |license|. A short note about this near
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1681 the top of the plugin should be sufficient. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1682
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1683 4 " License: This file is placed in the public domain.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1684
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1685
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1686 LINE CONTINUATION, AVOIDING SIDE EFFECTS *use-cpo-save*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1687
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1688 In line 18 above, the line-continuation mechanism is used |line-continuation|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1689 Users with 'compatible' set will run into trouble here, they will get an error
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1690 message. We can't just reset 'compatible', because that has a lot of side
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1691 effects. To avoid this, we will set the 'cpoptions' option to its Vim default
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1692 value and restore it later. That will allow the use of line-continuation and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1693 make the script work for most people. It is done like this: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1694
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1695 11 let s:save_cpo = &cpo
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1696 12 set cpo&vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1697 ..
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1698 42 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1699
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1700 We first store the old value of 'cpoptions' in the s:save_cpo variable. At
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1701 the end of the plugin this value is restored.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1702
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1703 Notice that a script-local variable is used |s:var|. A global variable could
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1704 already be in use for something else. Always use script-local variables for
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1705 things that are only used in the script.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1706
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1707
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1708 NOT LOADING
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1709
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1710 It's possible that a user doesn't always want to load this plugin. Or the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1711 system administrator has dropped it in the system-wide plugin directory, but a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1712 user has his own plugin he wants to use. Then the user must have a chance to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1713 disable loading this specific plugin. This will make it possible: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1714
2325
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1715 6 if exists("g:loaded_typecorr")
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1716 7 finish
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1717 8 endif
2325
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1718 9 let g:loaded_typecorr = 1
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1719
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1720 This also avoids that when the script is loaded twice it would cause error
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1721 messages for redefining functions and cause trouble for autocommands that are
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1722 added twice.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1723
2325
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1724 The name is recommended to start with "loaded_" and then the file name of the
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1725 plugin, literally. The "g:" is prepended just to avoid mistakes when using
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1726 the variable in a function (without "g:" it would be a variable local to the
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1727 function).
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1728
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1729 Using "finish" stops Vim from reading the rest of the file, it's much quicker
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1730 than using if-endif around the whole file.
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1731
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1732
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1733 MAPPING
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1734
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1735 Now let's make the plugin more interesting: We will add a mapping that adds a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1736 correction for the word under the cursor. We could just pick a key sequence
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1737 for this mapping, but the user might already use it for something else. To
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1738 allow the user to define which keys a mapping in a plugin uses, the <Leader>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1739 item can be used: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1740
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1741 22 map <unique> <Leader>a <Plug>TypecorrAdd
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1742
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1743 The "<Plug>TypecorrAdd" thing will do the work, more about that further on.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1744
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1745 The user can set the "mapleader" variable to the key sequence that he wants
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1746 this mapping to start with. Thus if the user has done: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1747
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1748 let mapleader = "_"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1749
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1750 the mapping will define "_a". If the user didn't do this, the default value
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1751 will be used, which is a backslash. Then a map for "\a" will be defined.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1752
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1753 Note that <unique> is used, this will cause an error message if the mapping
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1754 already happened to exist. |:map-<unique>|
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1755
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1756 But what if the user wants to define his own key sequence? We can allow that
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1757 with this mechanism: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1758
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1759 21 if !hasmapto('<Plug>TypecorrAdd')
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1760 22 map <unique> <Leader>a <Plug>TypecorrAdd
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1761 23 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1762
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1763 This checks if a mapping to "<Plug>TypecorrAdd" already exists, and only
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1764 defines the mapping from "<Leader>a" if it doesn't. The user then has a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1765 chance of putting this in his vimrc file: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1766
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1767 map ,c <Plug>TypecorrAdd
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1768
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1769 Then the mapped key sequence will be ",c" instead of "_a" or "\a".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1770
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1771
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1772 PIECES
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1773
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1774 If a script gets longer, you often want to break up the work in pieces. You
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1775 can use functions or mappings for this. But you don't want these functions
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1776 and mappings to interfere with the ones from other scripts. For example, you
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1777 could define a function Add(), but another script could try to define the same
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1778 function. To avoid this, we define the function local to the script by
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1779 prepending it with "s:".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1780
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1781 We will define a function that adds a new typing correction: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1782
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1783 30 function s:Add(from, correct)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1784 31 let to = input("type the correction for " . a:from . ": ")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1785 32 exe ":iabbrev " . a:from . " " . to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1786 ..
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1787 36 endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1788
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1789 Now we can call the function s:Add() from within this script. If another
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1790 script also defines s:Add(), it will be local to that script and can only
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1791 be called from the script it was defined in. There can also be a global Add()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1792 function (without the "s:"), which is again another function.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1793
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1794 <SID> can be used with mappings. It generates a script ID, which identifies
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1795 the current script. In our typing correction plugin we use it like this: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1796
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1797 24 noremap <unique> <script> <Plug>TypecorrAdd <SID>Add
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1798 ..
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1799 28 noremap <SID>Add :call <SID>Add(expand("<cword>"), 1)<CR>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1800
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1801 Thus when a user types "\a", this sequence is invoked: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1802
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1803 \a -> <Plug>TypecorrAdd -> <SID>Add -> :call <SID>Add()
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1804
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1805 If another script would also map <SID>Add, it would get another script ID and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1806 thus define another mapping.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1807
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1808 Note that instead of s:Add() we use <SID>Add() here. That is because the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1809 mapping is typed by the user, thus outside of the script. The <SID> is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1810 translated to the script ID, so that Vim knows in which script to look for
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1811 the Add() function.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1812
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1813 This is a bit complicated, but it's required for the plugin to work together
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1814 with other plugins. The basic rule is that you use <SID>Add() in mappings and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1815 s:Add() in other places (the script itself, autocommands, user commands).
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1816
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1817 We can also add a menu entry to do the same as the mapping: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1818
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1819 26 noremenu <script> Plugin.Add\ Correction <SID>Add
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1820
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1821 The "Plugin" menu is recommended for adding menu items for plugins. In this
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1822 case only one item is used. When adding more items, creating a submenu is
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1823 recommended. For example, "Plugin.CVS" could be used for a plugin that offers
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1824 CVS operations "Plugin.CVS.checkin", "Plugin.CVS.checkout", etc.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1825
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1826 Note that in line 28 ":noremap" is used to avoid that any other mappings cause
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1827 trouble. Someone may have remapped ":call", for example. In line 24 we also
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1828 use ":noremap", but we do want "<SID>Add" to be remapped. This is why
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1829 "<script>" is used here. This only allows mappings which are local to the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1830 script. |:map-<script>| The same is done in line 26 for ":noremenu".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1831 |:menu-<script>|
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1832
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1833
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1834 <SID> AND <Plug> *using-<Plug>*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1835
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1836 Both <SID> and <Plug> are used to avoid that mappings of typed keys interfere
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1837 with mappings that are only to be used from other mappings. Note the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1838 difference between using <SID> and <Plug>:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1839
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1840 <Plug> is visible outside of the script. It is used for mappings which the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1841 user might want to map a key sequence to. <Plug> is a special code
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1842 that a typed key will never produce.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1843 To make it very unlikely that other plugins use the same sequence of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1844 characters, use this structure: <Plug> scriptname mapname
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1845 In our example the scriptname is "Typecorr" and the mapname is "Add".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1846 This results in "<Plug>TypecorrAdd". Only the first character of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1847 scriptname and mapname is uppercase, so that we can see where mapname
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1848 starts.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1849
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1850 <SID> is the script ID, a unique identifier for a script.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1851 Internally Vim translates <SID> to "<SNR>123_", where "123" can be any
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1852 number. Thus a function "<SID>Add()" will have a name "<SNR>11_Add()"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1853 in one script, and "<SNR>22_Add()" in another. You can see this if
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1854 you use the ":function" command to get a list of functions. The
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1855 translation of <SID> in mappings is exactly the same, that's how you
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1856 can call a script-local function from a mapping.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1857
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1858
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1859 USER COMMAND
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1860
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1861 Now let's add a user command to add a correction: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1862
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1863 38 if !exists(":Correct")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1864 39 command -nargs=1 Correct :call s:Add(<q-args>, 0)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1865 40 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1866
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1867 The user command is defined only if no command with the same name already
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1868 exists. Otherwise we would get an error here. Overriding the existing user
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1869 command with ":command!" is not a good idea, this would probably make the user
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1870 wonder why the command he defined himself doesn't work. |:command|
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1871
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1872
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1873 SCRIPT VARIABLES
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1874
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1875 When a variable starts with "s:" it is a script variable. It can only be used
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1876 inside a script. Outside the script it's not visible. This avoids trouble
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1877 with using the same variable name in different scripts. The variables will be
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1878 kept as long as Vim is running. And the same variables are used when sourcing
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1879 the same script again. |s:var|
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1880
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1881 The fun is that these variables can also be used in functions, autocommands
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1882 and user commands that are defined in the script. In our example we can add
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1883 a few lines to count the number of corrections: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1884
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1885 19 let s:count = 4
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1886 ..
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1887 30 function s:Add(from, correct)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1888 ..
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1889 34 let s:count = s:count + 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1890 35 echo s:count . " corrections now"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1891 36 endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1892
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1893 First s:count is initialized to 4 in the script itself. When later the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1894 s:Add() function is called, it increments s:count. It doesn't matter from
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1895 where the function was called, since it has been defined in the script, it
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1896 will use the local variables from this script.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1897
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1898
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1899 THE RESULT
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1900
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1901 Here is the resulting complete example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1902
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1903 1 " Vim global plugin for correcting typing mistakes
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1904 2 " Last Change: 2000 Oct 15
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1905 3 " Maintainer: Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1906 4 " License: This file is placed in the public domain.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1907 5
2325
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1908 6 if exists("g:loaded_typecorr")
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1909 7 finish
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1910 8 endif
2325
f177a6431514 Better implementation of creating the Color Scheme menu. (Juergen Kraemer)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2301
diff changeset
1911 9 let g:loaded_typecorr = 1
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1912 10
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1913 11 let s:save_cpo = &cpo
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1914 12 set cpo&vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1915 13
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1916 14 iabbrev teh the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1917 15 iabbrev otehr other
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1918 16 iabbrev wnat want
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1919 17 iabbrev synchronisation
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1920 18 \ synchronization
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1921 19 let s:count = 4
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1922 20
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1923 21 if !hasmapto('<Plug>TypecorrAdd')
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1924 22 map <unique> <Leader>a <Plug>TypecorrAdd
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1925 23 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1926 24 noremap <unique> <script> <Plug>TypecorrAdd <SID>Add
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1927 25
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1928 26 noremenu <script> Plugin.Add\ Correction <SID>Add
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1929 27
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1930 28 noremap <SID>Add :call <SID>Add(expand("<cword>"), 1)<CR>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1931 29
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1932 30 function s:Add(from, correct)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1933 31 let to = input("type the correction for " . a:from . ": ")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1934 32 exe ":iabbrev " . a:from . " " . to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1935 33 if a:correct | exe "normal viws\<C-R>\" \b\e" | endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1936 34 let s:count = s:count + 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1937 35 echo s:count . " corrections now"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1938 36 endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1939 37
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1940 38 if !exists(":Correct")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1941 39 command -nargs=1 Correct :call s:Add(<q-args>, 0)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1942 40 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1943 41
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1944 42 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1945
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1946 Line 33 wasn't explained yet. It applies the new correction to the word under
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1947 the cursor. The |:normal| command is used to use the new abbreviation. Note
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1948 that mappings and abbreviations are expanded here, even though the function
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1949 was called from a mapping defined with ":noremap".
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1950
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1951 Using "unix" for the 'fileformat' option is recommended. The Vim scripts will
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1952 then work everywhere. Scripts with 'fileformat' set to "dos" do not work on
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1953 Unix. Also see |:source_crnl|. To be sure it is set right, do this before
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1954 writing the file: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1955
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1956 :set fileformat=unix
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1957
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1958
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1959 DOCUMENTATION *write-local-help*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1960
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1961 It's a good idea to also write some documentation for your plugin. Especially
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1962 when its behavior can be changed by the user. See |add-local-help| for how
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1963 they are installed.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1964
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1965 Here is a simple example for a plugin help file, called "typecorr.txt": >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1966
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1967 1 *typecorr.txt* Plugin for correcting typing mistakes
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1968 2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1969 3 If you make typing mistakes, this plugin will have them corrected
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1970 4 automatically.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1971 5
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1972 6 There are currently only a few corrections. Add your own if you like.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1973 7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1974 8 Mappings:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1975 9 <Leader>a or <Plug>TypecorrAdd
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1976 10 Add a correction for the word under the cursor.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1977 11
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1978 12 Commands:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1979 13 :Correct {word}
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1980 14 Add a correction for {word}.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1981 15
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1982 16 *typecorr-settings*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1983 17 This plugin doesn't have any settings.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1984
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1985 The first line is actually the only one for which the format matters. It will
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1986 be extracted from the help file to be put in the "LOCAL ADDITIONS:" section of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1987 help.txt |local-additions|. The first "*" must be in the first column of the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1988 first line. After adding your help file do ":help" and check that the entries
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1989 line up nicely.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1990
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1991 You can add more tags inside ** in your help file. But be careful not to use
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1992 existing help tags. You would probably use the name of your plugin in most of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1993 them, like "typecorr-settings" in the example.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1994
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1995 Using references to other parts of the help in || is recommended. This makes
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1996 it easy for the user to find associated help.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1997
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1998
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
1999 FILETYPE DETECTION *plugin-filetype*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2000
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2001 If your filetype is not already detected by Vim, you should create a filetype
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2002 detection snippet in a separate file. It is usually in the form of an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2003 autocommand that sets the filetype when the file name matches a pattern.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2004 Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2005
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2006 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.foo set filetype=foofoo
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2007
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2008 Write this single-line file as "ftdetect/foofoo.vim" in the first directory
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2009 that appears in 'runtimepath'. For Unix that would be
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2010 "~/.vim/ftdetect/foofoo.vim". The convention is to use the name of the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2011 filetype for the script name.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2012
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2013 You can make more complicated checks if you like, for example to inspect the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2014 contents of the file to recognize the language. Also see |new-filetype|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2015
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2016
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2017 SUMMARY *plugin-special*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2018
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2019 Summary of special things to use in a plugin:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2020
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2021 s:name Variables local to the script.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2022
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2023 <SID> Script-ID, used for mappings and functions local to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2024 the script.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2025
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2026 hasmapto() Function to test if the user already defined a mapping
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2027 for functionality the script offers.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2028
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2029 <Leader> Value of "mapleader", which the user defines as the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2030 keys that plugin mappings start with.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2031
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2032 :map <unique> Give a warning if a mapping already exists.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2033
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2034 :noremap <script> Use only mappings local to the script, not global
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2035 mappings.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2036
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2037 exists(":Cmd") Check if a user command already exists.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2038
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2039 ==============================================================================
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
2040 *41.12* Writing a filetype plugin *write-filetype-plugin* *ftplugin*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2041
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2042 A filetype plugin is like a global plugin, except that it sets options and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2043 defines mappings for the current buffer only. See |add-filetype-plugin| for
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2044 how this type of plugin is used.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2045
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
2046 First read the section on global plugins above |41.11|. All that is said there
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2047 also applies to filetype plugins. There are a few extras, which are explained
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2048 here. The essential thing is that a filetype plugin should only have an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2049 effect on the current buffer.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2050
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2051
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2052 DISABLING
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2053
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2054 If you are writing a filetype plugin to be used by many people, they need a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2055 chance to disable loading it. Put this at the top of the plugin: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2056
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2057 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2058 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2059 finish
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2060 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2061 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2062
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2063 This also needs to be used to avoid that the same plugin is executed twice for
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2064 the same buffer (happens when using an ":edit" command without arguments).
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2065
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2066 Now users can disable loading the default plugin completely by making a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2067 filetype plugin with only this line: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2068
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2069 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2070
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2071 This does require that the filetype plugin directory comes before $VIMRUNTIME
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2072 in 'runtimepath'!
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2073
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2074 If you do want to use the default plugin, but overrule one of the settings,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2075 you can write the different setting in a script: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2076
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2077 setlocal textwidth=70
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2078
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2079 Now write this in the "after" directory, so that it gets sourced after the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2080 distributed "vim.vim" ftplugin |after-directory|. For Unix this would be
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2081 "~/.vim/after/ftplugin/vim.vim". Note that the default plugin will have set
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2082 "b:did_ftplugin", but it is ignored here.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2083
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2084
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2085 OPTIONS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2086
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2087 To make sure the filetype plugin only affects the current buffer use the >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2088
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2089 :setlocal
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2090
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2091 command to set options. And only set options which are local to a buffer (see
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2092 the help for the option to check that). When using |:setlocal| for global
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2093 options or options local to a window, the value will change for many buffers,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2094 and that is not what a filetype plugin should do.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2095
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2096 When an option has a value that is a list of flags or items, consider using
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2097 "+=" and "-=" to keep the existing value. Be aware that the user may have
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2098 changed an option value already. First resetting to the default value and
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2099 then changing it often a good idea. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2100
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2101 :setlocal formatoptions& formatoptions+=ro
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2102
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2103
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2104 MAPPINGS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2105
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2106 To make sure mappings will only work in the current buffer use the >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2107
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2108 :map <buffer>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2109
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2110 command. This needs to be combined with the two-step mapping explained above.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2111 An example of how to define functionality in a filetype plugin: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2112
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2113 if !hasmapto('<Plug>JavaImport')
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2114 map <buffer> <unique> <LocalLeader>i <Plug>JavaImport
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2115 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2116 noremap <buffer> <unique> <Plug>JavaImport oimport ""<Left><Esc>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2117
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2118 |hasmapto()| is used to check if the user has already defined a map to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2119 <Plug>JavaImport. If not, then the filetype plugin defines the default
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2120 mapping. This starts with |<LocalLeader>|, which allows the user to select
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2121 the key(s) he wants filetype plugin mappings to start with. The default is a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2122 backslash.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2123 "<unique>" is used to give an error message if the mapping already exists or
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2124 overlaps with an existing mapping.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2125 |:noremap| is used to avoid that any other mappings that the user has defined
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2126 interferes. You might want to use ":noremap <script>" to allow remapping
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2127 mappings defined in this script that start with <SID>.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2128
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2129 The user must have a chance to disable the mappings in a filetype plugin,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2130 without disabling everything. Here is an example of how this is done for a
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2131 plugin for the mail filetype: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2132
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2133 " Add mappings, unless the user didn't want this.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2134 if !exists("no_plugin_maps") && !exists("no_mail_maps")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2135 " Quote text by inserting "> "
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2136 if !hasmapto('<Plug>MailQuote')
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2137 vmap <buffer> <LocalLeader>q <Plug>MailQuote
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2138 nmap <buffer> <LocalLeader>q <Plug>MailQuote
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2139 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2140 vnoremap <buffer> <Plug>MailQuote :s/^/> /<CR>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2141 nnoremap <buffer> <Plug>MailQuote :.,$s/^/> /<CR>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2142 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2143
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2144 Two global variables are used:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2145 no_plugin_maps disables mappings for all filetype plugins
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2146 no_mail_maps disables mappings for a specific filetype
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2147
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2148
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2149 USER COMMANDS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2150
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2151 To add a user command for a specific file type, so that it can only be used in
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2152 one buffer, use the "-buffer" argument to |:command|. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2153
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2154 :command -buffer Make make %:r.s
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2155
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2156
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2157 VARIABLES
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2158
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2159 A filetype plugin will be sourced for each buffer of the type it's for. Local
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2160 script variables |s:var| will be shared between all invocations. Use local
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2161 buffer variables |b:var| if you want a variable specifically for one buffer.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2162
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2163
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2164 FUNCTIONS
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2165
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2166 When defining a function, this only needs to be done once. But the filetype
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2167 plugin will be sourced every time a file with this filetype will be opened.
2207
b17bbfa96fa0 Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents: 2154
diff changeset
2168 This construct makes sure the function is only defined once: >
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2169
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2170 :if !exists("*s:Func")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2171 : function s:Func(arg)
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2172 : ...
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2173 : endfunction
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2174 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2175 <
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2176
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2177 UNDO *undo_ftplugin*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2178
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2179 When the user does ":setfiletype xyz" the effect of the previous filetype
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2180 should be undone. Set the b:undo_ftplugin variable to the commands that will
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2181 undo the settings in your filetype plugin. Example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2182
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2183 let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal fo< com< tw< commentstring<"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2184 \ . "| unlet b:match_ignorecase b:match_words b:match_skip"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2185
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2186 Using ":setlocal" with "<" after the option name resets the option to its
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2187 global value. That is mostly the best way to reset the option value.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2188
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2189 This does require removing the "C" flag from 'cpoptions' to allow line
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2190 continuation, as mentioned above |use-cpo-save|.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2191
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2192
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2193 FILE NAME
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2194
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2195 The filetype must be included in the file name |ftplugin-name|. Use one of
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2196 these three forms:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2197
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2198 .../ftplugin/stuff.vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2199 .../ftplugin/stuff_foo.vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2200 .../ftplugin/stuff/bar.vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2201
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2202 "stuff" is the filetype, "foo" and "bar" are arbitrary names.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2203
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2204
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2205 SUMMARY *ftplugin-special*
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2206
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2207 Summary of special things to use in a filetype plugin:
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2208
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2209 <LocalLeader> Value of "maplocalleader", which the user defines as
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2210 the keys that filetype plugin mappings start with.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2211
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2212 :map <buffer> Define a mapping local to the buffer.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2213
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2214 :noremap <script> Only remap mappings defined in this script that start
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2215 with <SID>.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2216
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2217 :setlocal Set an option for the current buffer only.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2218
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2219 :command -buffer Define a user command local to the buffer.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2220
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2221 exists("*s:Func") Check if a function was already defined.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2222
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2223 Also see |plugin-special|, the special things used for all plugins.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2224
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2225 ==============================================================================
161
6df0106fc595 updated for version 7.0049
vimboss
parents: 158
diff changeset
2226 *41.13* Writing a compiler plugin *write-compiler-plugin*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2227
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2228 A compiler plugin sets options for use with a specific compiler. The user can
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2229 load it with the |:compiler| command. The main use is to set the
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2230 'errorformat' and 'makeprg' options.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2231
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2232 Easiest is to have a look at examples. This command will edit all the default
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2233 compiler plugins: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2234
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2235 :next $VIMRUNTIME/compiler/*.vim
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2236
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2237 Use |:next| to go to the next plugin file.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2238
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2239 There are two special items about these files. First is a mechanism to allow
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2240 a user to overrule or add to the default file. The default files start with: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2241
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2242 :if exists("current_compiler")
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2243 : finish
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2244 :endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2245 :let current_compiler = "mine"
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2246
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2247 When you write a compiler file and put it in your personal runtime directory
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2248 (e.g., ~/.vim/compiler for Unix), you set the "current_compiler" variable to
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2249 make the default file skip the settings.
570
27d1ec742f17 updated for version 7.0162
vimboss
parents: 434
diff changeset
2250 *:CompilerSet*
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2251 The second mechanism is to use ":set" for ":compiler!" and ":setlocal" for
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2252 ":compiler". Vim defines the ":CompilerSet" user command for this. However,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2253 older Vim versions don't, thus your plugin should define it then. This is an
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2254 example: >
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2255
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2256 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2257 command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2258 endif
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2259 CompilerSet errorformat& " use the default 'errorformat'
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2260 CompilerSet makeprg=nmake
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2261
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2262 When you write a compiler plugin for the Vim distribution or for a system-wide
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2263 runtime directory, use the mechanism mentioned above. When
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2264 "current_compiler" was already set by a user plugin nothing will be done.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2265
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2266 When you write a compiler plugin to overrule settings from a default plugin,
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2267 don't check "current_compiler". This plugin is supposed to be loaded
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2268 last, thus it should be in a directory at the end of 'runtimepath'. For Unix
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2269 that could be ~/.vim/after/compiler.
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2270
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2271 ==============================================================================
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2272 *41.14* Writing a plugin that loads quickly *write-plugin-quickload*
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2273
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2274 A plugin may grow and become quite long. The startup delay may become
1620
73fe8baea242 updated for version 7.2a
vimboss
parents: 1326
diff changeset
2275 noticeable, while you hardly ever use the plugin. Then it's time for a
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2276 quickload plugin.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2277
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2278 The basic idea is that the plugin is loaded twice. The first time user
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2279 commands and mappings are defined that offer the functionality. The second
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2280 time the functions that implement the functionality are defined.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2281
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2282 It may sound surprising that quickload means loading a script twice. What we
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2283 mean is that it loads quickly the first time, postponing the bulk of the
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2284 script to the second time, which only happens when you actually use it. When
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2285 you always use the functionality it actually gets slower!
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2286
793
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2287 Note that since Vim 7 there is an alternative: use the |autoload|
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2288 functionality |41.15|.
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2289
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2290 The following example shows how it's done: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2291
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2292 " Vim global plugin for demonstrating quick loading
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2293 " Last Change: 2005 Feb 25
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2294 " Maintainer: Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2295 " License: This file is placed in the public domain.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2296
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2297 if !exists("s:did_load")
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2298 command -nargs=* BNRead call BufNetRead(<f-args>)
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2299 map <F19> :call BufNetWrite('something')<CR>
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2300
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2301 let s:did_load = 1
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2302 exe 'au FuncUndefined BufNet* source ' . expand('<sfile>')
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2303 finish
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2304 endif
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2305
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2306 function BufNetRead(...)
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2307 echo 'BufNetRead(' . string(a:000) . ')'
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2308 " read functionality here
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2309 endfunction
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2310
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2311 function BufNetWrite(...)
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2312 echo 'BufNetWrite(' . string(a:000) . ')'
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2313 " write functionality here
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2314 endfunction
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2315
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2316 When the script is first loaded "s:did_load" is not set. The commands between
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2317 the "if" and "endif" will be executed. This ends in a |:finish| command, thus
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2318 the rest of the script is not executed.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2319
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2320 The second time the script is loaded "s:did_load" exists and the commands
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2321 after the "endif" are executed. This defines the (possible long)
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2322 BufNetRead() and BufNetWrite() functions.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2323
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2324 If you drop this script in your plugin directory Vim will execute it on
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2325 startup. This is the sequence of events that happens:
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2326
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2327 1. The "BNRead" command is defined and the <F19> key is mapped when the script
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2328 is sourced at startup. A |FuncUndefined| autocommand is defined. The
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2329 ":finish" command causes the script to terminate early.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2330
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2331 2. The user types the BNRead command or presses the <F19> key. The
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2332 BufNetRead() or BufNetWrite() function will be called.
856
8cd729851562 updated for version 7.0g
vimboss
parents: 842
diff changeset
2333
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2334 3. Vim can't find the function and triggers the |FuncUndefined| autocommand
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2335 event. Since the pattern "BufNet*" matches the invoked function, the
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2336 command "source fname" will be executed. "fname" will be equal to the name
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2337 of the script, no matter where it is located, because it comes from
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2338 expanding "<sfile>" (see |expand()|).
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2339
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2340 4. The script is sourced again, the "s:did_load" variable exists and the
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2341 functions are defined.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2342
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2343 Notice that the functions that are loaded afterwards match the pattern in the
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2344 |FuncUndefined| autocommand. You must make sure that no other plugin defines
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2345 functions that match this pattern.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2346
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2347 ==============================================================================
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2348 *41.15* Writing library scripts *write-library-script*
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2349
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2350 Some functionality will be required in several places. When this becomes more
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2351 than a few lines you will want to put it in one script and use it from many
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2352 scripts. We will call that one script a library script.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2353
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2354 Manually loading a library script is possible, so long as you avoid loading it
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2355 when it's already done. You can do this with the |exists()| function.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2356 Example: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2357
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2358 if !exists('*MyLibFunction')
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2359 runtime library/mylibscript.vim
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2360 endif
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2361 call MyLibFunction(arg)
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2362
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2363 Here you need to know that MyLibFunction() is defined in a script
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2364 "library/mylibscript.vim" in one of the directories in 'runtimepath'.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2365
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2366 To make this a bit simpler Vim offers the autoload mechanism. Then the
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2367 example looks like this: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2368
270
a20218704019 updated for version 7.0072
vimboss
parents: 230
diff changeset
2369 call mylib#myfunction(arg)
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2370
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2371 That's a lot simpler, isn't it? Vim will recognize the function name and when
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2372 it's not defined search for the script "autoload/mylib.vim" in 'runtimepath'.
270
a20218704019 updated for version 7.0072
vimboss
parents: 230
diff changeset
2373 That script must define the "mylib#myfunction()" function.
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2374
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2375 You can put many other functions in the mylib.vim script, you are free to
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2376 organize your functions in library scripts. But you must use function names
323
03b3684919e3 updated for version 7.0084
vimboss
parents: 270
diff changeset
2377 where the part before the '#' matches the script name. Otherwise Vim would
03b3684919e3 updated for version 7.0084
vimboss
parents: 270
diff changeset
2378 not know what script to load.
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2379
681
9364d114ed8d updated for version 7.0204
vimboss
parents: 667
diff changeset
2380 If you get really enthusiastic and write lots of library scripts, you may
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2381 want to use subdirectories. Example: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2382
270
a20218704019 updated for version 7.0072
vimboss
parents: 230
diff changeset
2383 call netlib#ftp#read('somefile')
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2384
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2385 For Unix the library script used for this could be:
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2386
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2387 ~/.vim/autoload/netlib/ftp.vim
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2388
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2389 Where the function is defined like this: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2390
270
a20218704019 updated for version 7.0072
vimboss
parents: 230
diff changeset
2391 function netlib#ftp#read(fname)
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2392 " Read the file fname through ftp
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2393 endfunction
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2394
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2395 Notice that the name the function is defined with is exactly the same as the
323
03b3684919e3 updated for version 7.0084
vimboss
parents: 270
diff changeset
2396 name used for calling the function. And the part before the last '#'
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2397 exactly matches the subdirectory and script name.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2398
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2399 You can use the same mechanism for variables: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2400
270
a20218704019 updated for version 7.0072
vimboss
parents: 230
diff changeset
2401 let weekdays = dutch#weekdays
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2402
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2403 This will load the script "autoload/dutch.vim", which should contain something
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2404 like: >
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2405
270
a20218704019 updated for version 7.0072
vimboss
parents: 230
diff changeset
2406 let dutch#weekdays = ['zondag', 'maandag', 'dinsdag', 'woensdag',
170
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2407 \ 'donderdag', 'vrijdag', 'zaterdag']
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2408
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2409 Further reading: |autoload|.
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2410
8c60f65311fa updated for version 7.0052
vimboss
parents: 164
diff changeset
2411 ==============================================================================
793
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2412 *41.16* Distributing Vim scripts *distribute-script*
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2413
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2414 Vim users will look for scripts on the Vim website: http://www.vim.org.
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2415 If you made something that is useful for others, share it!
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2416
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2417 Vim scripts can be used on any system. There might not be a tar or gzip
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2418 command. If you want to pack files together and/or compress them the "zip"
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2419 utility is recommended.
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2420
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2421 For utmost portability use Vim itself to pack scripts together. This can be
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2422 done with the Vimball utility. See |vimball|.
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2423
799
6beb2c667935 updated for version 7.0b
vimboss
parents: 793
diff changeset
2424 It's good if you add a line to allow automatic updating. See |glvs-plugins|.
6beb2c667935 updated for version 7.0b
vimboss
parents: 793
diff changeset
2425
793
8c0b00d50acf updated for version 7.0231
vimboss
parents: 681
diff changeset
2426 ==============================================================================
7
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2427
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2428 Next chapter: |usr_42.txt| Add new menus
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2429
3fc0f57ecb91 updated for version 7.0001
vimboss
parents:
diff changeset
2430 Copyright: see |manual-copyright| vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: